blob: 2d4d31212eedd5f8441bcaff387b9dc83b77e430 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07007 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050016#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070017#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020022#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040024/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070037 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010040 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070044 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070045 */
46
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040047/**
48 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070056 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040057 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
69 *
70 * Finally, for received frames, the driver is able to indicate that it has
71 * filled a radiotap header and put that in front of the frame; if it does
72 * not do so then mac80211 may add this under certain circumstances.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070073 */
74
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020075/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040076 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050090struct device;
91
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040092/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020093 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
94 *
95 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010096 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020097 */
98enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020099 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100100 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200101};
102
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200103#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
104
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200105/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800106 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
108 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
109 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
110 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
111 */
112enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
113 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
114 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
115 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
116 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
117};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200118#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800119
120/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400121 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
122 *
123 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100124 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400125 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400126 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200127 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
128 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400129 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100130 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300131 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200132 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400133 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700134struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100136 u16 cw_min;
137 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200138 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300139 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200140 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700141};
142
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700143struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
144 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
145 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
146 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
147 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
148};
149
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100150/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200151 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200155 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
156 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200157 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200158 */
159enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100162 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200163 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200164 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200165};
166
167/**
168 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
169 *
170 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
171 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
172 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100173 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200174 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200175 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
176 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
177 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
178 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100179 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100180 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
182 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
183 */
184struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100185 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200186 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200187
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200188 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
189
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100190 bool radar_enabled;
191
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100192 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200193};
194
195/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100196 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
197 *
198 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
199 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
200 *
201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
202 * also implies a change in the AID.
203 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
204 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300205 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700206 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200208 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
210 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
211 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
212 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
213 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
214 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200215 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300217 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200218 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
219 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200220 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200221 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200222 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300223 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200224 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100225 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
226 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300227 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
228 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100229 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
230 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
231 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100232 */
233enum ieee80211_bss_change {
234 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
235 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
236 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300237 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200238 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200239 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200240 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200241 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
242 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
243 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200244 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200245 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300246 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200247 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200248 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300249 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200250 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300251 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200252 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100253 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300254 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100255 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200256
257 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100258};
259
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300260/*
261 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
262 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
263 * filtering will be disabled.
264 */
265#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
266
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700268 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
269 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
270 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
271 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
272 */
273enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
274 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
275 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
276};
277
278/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100279 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
280 *
281 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
282 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
283 *
284 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
286 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530287 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100288 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
289 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200290 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
291 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
292 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
293 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
294 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
295 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100296 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200297 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300298 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200299 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100300 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
301 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
302 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
303 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
304 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200305 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
306 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100307 * (see @sync_tsf)
308 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
309 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700310 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800311 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200312 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
313 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
314 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300315 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100316 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200317 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
318 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100319 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
320 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100321 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200322 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200323 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
324 * implies disabled
325 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300326 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
327 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
328 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
329 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100330 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
331 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
332 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200333 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200334 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
335 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
336 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300337 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
338 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200339 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300340 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
341 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200342 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100343 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100344 */
345struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200346 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100347 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200348 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530349 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100350 u16 aid;
351 /* erp related data */
352 bool use_cts_prot;
353 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300354 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200355 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800356 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700357 u16 beacon_int;
358 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200359 u64 sync_tsf;
360 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100361 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100362 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300363 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100364 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200365 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200366 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
367 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100368 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300369 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100370 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200371 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200372 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300374 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
375 size_t ssid_len;
376 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200377 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100378 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100379};
380
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800381/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200382 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800383 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700384 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800385 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100386 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200387 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
388 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
389 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
390 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
391 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
392 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
393 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
394 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
395 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
396 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
397 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
400 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200401 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200402 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
403 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200404 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200405 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200406 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
407 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
408 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
409 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
410 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
411 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
412 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
413 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200414 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
415 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
416 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300417 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
418 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200419 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
420 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
421 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600422 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
423 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
424 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100425 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
426 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
427 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200428 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
429 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200430 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
431 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100432 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
433 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
434 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
436 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
437 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
438 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100439 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
440 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
441 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100442 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
443 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
444 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
446 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
447 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400448 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200449 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
450 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100451 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
452 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
453 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
454 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200455 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
456 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
457 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530458 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
459 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
460 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200461 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
462 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
463 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200464 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
465 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530466 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
467 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
468 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200469 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
470 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
471 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200472 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
473 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200474 *
475 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
476 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800477 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200478enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
483 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
484 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
485 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
486 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
487 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
488 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
489 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
490 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
491 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600492 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100493 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100496 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100498 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100499 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200502 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200504 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200506 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530507 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200508 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200509 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200510};
511
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200512#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
513
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200514/**
515 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
516 *
517 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
518 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
519 *
520 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
521 */
522enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
523 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
524};
525
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200526/*
527 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
528 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
529 */
530#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
533 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
534 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100535 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200538
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530539/**
540 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
541 * Rate Control algorithm.
542 *
543 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
544 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
545 *
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
548 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
550 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
552 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
554 * Greenfield mode.
555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100556 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
557 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
558 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530559 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
560 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
561 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
562 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
563 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200564enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
565 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
568
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100569 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
574 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100575 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
576 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
577 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800578};
579
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200580
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200581/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
582#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200583
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
585#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
586
587/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200588#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200589
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200590/* maximum number of rate table entries */
591#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
592
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200593/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200594 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200595 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
597 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200598 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200599 *
600 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
601 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
602 *
603 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
604 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200605 *
606 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
607 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
608 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
609 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
610 * information
611 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
612 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
613 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
614 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
615 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
616 * information should then contain
617 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
618 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
619 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200620 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200621struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
622 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100623 u16 count:5,
624 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000625} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200626
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100627#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
628
629static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
630 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
631{
632 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200633 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
634 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100635}
636
637static inline u8
638ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
639{
640 return rate->idx & 0xF;
641}
642
643static inline u8
644ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
645{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200646 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100647}
648
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200649/**
650 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200651 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200652 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
653 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
654 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
655 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
656 *
657 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200658 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200659 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100660 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700661 * @control: union for control data
662 * @status: union for status data
663 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100664 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700665 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100666 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700667 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200668 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200669 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200670struct ieee80211_tx_info {
671 /* common information */
672 u32 flags;
673 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200674
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200675 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100676
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100677 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100678
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200679 union {
680 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200681 union {
682 /* rate control */
683 struct {
684 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
685 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
686 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200687 u8 use_rts:1;
688 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200689 u8 short_preamble:1;
690 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200691 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 };
693 /* only needed before rate control */
694 unsigned long jiffies;
695 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200696 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
698 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200699 u32 flags;
700 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200701 } control;
702 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200703 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704 int ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200705 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100706 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200707 u8 antenna;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200708 /* 21 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200709 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710 struct {
711 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
712 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200713 u8 pad[4];
714
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200715 void *rate_driver_data[
716 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
717 };
718 void *driver_data[
719 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200720 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700721};
722
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300723/**
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -0700724 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300725 *
726 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
727 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
728 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
729 *
730 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
731 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
732 */
733struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
734 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
735 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
736};
737
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200738static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
739{
740 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
741}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400742
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200743static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
744{
745 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
746}
747
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200748/**
749 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
750 *
751 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
752 *
753 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
754 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
755 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
756 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
757 *
758 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
759 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
760 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
761 */
762static inline void
763ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
764{
765 int i;
766
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
768 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
769 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
770 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
771 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
772 /* clear the rate counts */
773 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
774 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
775
776 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200777 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200778 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
779 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
780 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
781}
782
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400783
784/**
785 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
786 *
787 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
788 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
789 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
790 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400791 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
792 * verification has been done by the hardware.
793 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
794 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
795 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400796 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
797 * the frame.
798 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
799 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100801 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
802 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
803 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800804 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
805 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
806 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200807 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200808 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100809 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200810 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
811 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100812 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
813 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200814 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
815 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
816 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200817 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
818 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
819 * each A-MPDU
820 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
821 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
822 * monitoring purposes only
823 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
824 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
825 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
826 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
827 * on this subframe
828 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
829 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200830 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200831 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200832 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
833 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200834 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
835 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
836 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
837 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
838 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
839 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
840 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
841 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
842 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400843 */
844enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200845 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
846 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
847 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
848 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
849 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
850 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800851 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200852 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
853 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
854 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
855 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
856 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
857 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
858 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
859 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
860 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
861 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
862 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
863 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
864 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800865 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100866 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200867 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200868 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200869 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
870 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200871 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400872};
873
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200874#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
875
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400876/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200877 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
878 *
879 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
880 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
881 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
882 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
883 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
884 */
885enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
886 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
887 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
888 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
889};
890
891/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400892 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
893 *
894 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
895 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200896 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200897 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900898 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
899 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200900 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
901 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100902 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400903 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200904 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
905 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
906 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200907 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
908 * values were filled.
909 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
910 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400911 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200912 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100913 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
914 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400915 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200916 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200917 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200918 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
919 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
920 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400921 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700922struct ieee80211_rx_status {
923 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200924 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200925 u32 ampdu_reference;
926 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200927 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200928 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200929 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100930 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200931 u8 rx_flags;
932 u8 band;
933 u8 antenna;
934 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200935 u8 chains;
936 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200937 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700938};
939
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400940/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400941 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
942 *
943 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
944 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100945 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
946 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
947 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200948 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
949 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
950 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
951 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
952 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
953 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
954 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200955 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
956 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
957 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
958 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
959 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200960 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
961 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400962 */
963enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100964 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +0200965 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200966 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200967 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400968};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700969
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200970
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700971/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200972 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
973 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200974 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100975 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200976 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200977 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +0100978 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +0200979 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200980 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100981 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200982 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
983 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200984 */
985enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100986 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200987 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100988 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200989 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200990 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
991 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
992 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200993 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200994};
995
996/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100997 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
998 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200999 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1000 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1001 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1002 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1003 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001004 */
1005enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1006 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1007 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1008 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1009 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1010
1011 /* keep last */
1012 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1013};
1014
1015/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001016 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1017 *
1018 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1019 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001020 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1021 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001022 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001023 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001024 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1025 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1026 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1027 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001028 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1029 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1030 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001031 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1032 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1033 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1034 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001035 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1036 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001037 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001038 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001039 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001040 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001041 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001042 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1043 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001044 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001045 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1046 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001047 *
1048 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1049 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001050 * configured for an HT channel.
1051 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1052 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001053 */
1054struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001055 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001056 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001057 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001058
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001059 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001060 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001061
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001062 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1063
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001064 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001065 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001066 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001067};
1068
1069/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001070 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1071 *
1072 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1073 * operation.
1074 *
1075 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1076 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1077 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1078 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1079 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1080 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001081 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001082 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1083 */
1084struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1085 u64 timestamp;
1086 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001087 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001088 u8 count;
1089};
1090
1091/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001092 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1093 *
1094 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1095 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001096 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1097 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1098 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1099 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001100 */
1101enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1102 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001103 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001104};
1105
1106/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001107 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1108 *
1109 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1110 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1111 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001112 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001113 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1114 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001115 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001116 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1117 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001118 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001119 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1120 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1121 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1122 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001123 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1124 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001125 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1126 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1127 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1128 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1129 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001130 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001131 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001132 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001133 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1134 * sizeof(void *).
1135 */
1136struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001137 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001138 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001139 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001140 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001141 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001142
1143 u8 cab_queue;
1144 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1145
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001146 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1147
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001148 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001149
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001150#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1151 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1152#endif
1153
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001154 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001155 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001156};
1157
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001158static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1159{
1160#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001161 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001162#endif
1163 return false;
1164}
1165
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001166/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001167 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1168 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1169 *
1170 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1171 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1172 *
1173 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1174 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1175 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1176 */
1177struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1178
1179/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001180 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1181 *
1182 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1183 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1184 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001185 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1186 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1187 * particular key.
1188 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1189 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1190 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001191 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1192 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001193 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001194 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1195 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001196 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001197 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001198 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1199 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001200 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1201 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1202 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1203 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1204 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1205 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1206 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001207 */
1208enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001209 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1210 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001211 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001212 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001213 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001214 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001215};
1216
1217/**
1218 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1219 *
1220 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1221 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1222 *
1223 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1224 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001225 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001226 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001227 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1228 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1229 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001230 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1231 * data block:
1232 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1233 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1234 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001235 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1236 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001237 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001238struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001239 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001240 u8 icv_len;
1241 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001242 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001243 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001244 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001245 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001246 u8 key[0];
1247};
1248
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001249/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001250 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1251 *
1252 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1253 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1254 *
1255 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1256 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1257 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1258 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1259 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1260 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1261 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1262 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1263 * key_idx value calculation:
1264 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1265 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1266 */
1267struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1268 u32 cipher;
1269 u16 iftype;
1270 u8 hdr_len;
1271 u8 pn_len;
1272 u8 pn_off;
1273 u8 key_idx_off;
1274 u8 key_idx_mask;
1275 u8 key_idx_shift;
1276 u8 mic_len;
1277};
1278
1279/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001280 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1281 *
1282 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1283 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1284 *
1285 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1286 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1287 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001288enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001289 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001290};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001291
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001292/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001293 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1294 *
1295 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1296 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1297 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1298 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1299 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1300 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1301 */
1302enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1303 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1304 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1305 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1306 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1307 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1308 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1309};
1310
1311/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001312 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1313 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1314 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1315 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1316 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1317 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1318 *
1319 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1320 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1321 */
1322enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1323 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1324 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1325 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1326 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1327};
1328
1329/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001330 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1331 *
1332 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001333 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001334 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1335 */
1336struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1337 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1338 struct {
1339 s8 idx;
1340 u8 count;
1341 u8 count_cts;
1342 u8 count_rts;
1343 u16 flags;
1344 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1345};
1346
1347/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001348 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1349 *
1350 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1351 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1352 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1353 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1354 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001355 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001356 *
1357 * @addr: MAC address
1358 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001359 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001360 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1361 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001362 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001363 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1364 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001365 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1366 * if wme is supported.
1367 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001368 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001369 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1370 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1371 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1372 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001373 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001374 * @rates: rate control selection table
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001375 */
1376struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001377 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001378 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1379 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001380 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001381 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001382 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001383 u8 uapsd_queues;
1384 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001385 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001386 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001387 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001388 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001389
1390 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001391 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001392};
1393
1394/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001395 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1396 *
1397 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301398 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001399 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001400 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1401 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1402 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001403enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001404 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1405};
1406
1407/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001408 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1409 *
1410 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1411 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1412 */
1413struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1414 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1415};
1416
1417/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001418 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1419 *
1420 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1421 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1422 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1423 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1424 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1425 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001426 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1427 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1428 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1429 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1430 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1431 * algorithm.
1432 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1433 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1434 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1435 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1436 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1437 * CCK frames.
1438 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001439 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1440 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1441 * the FCS at the end.
1442 *
1443 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1444 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1445 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1446 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1447 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1448 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001449 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001450 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001451 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1452 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1453 *
1454 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1455 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1456 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001457 *
1458 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1459 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1460 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1461 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1462 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001463 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1464 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1465 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1466 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1467 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001468 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1469 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1470 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301471 *
1472 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1473 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001474 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001475 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1476 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1477 *
1478 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1479 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1480 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1481 *
1482 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1483 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001484 *
1485 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1486 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001487 *
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001488 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1489 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1490 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1491 * that should be using more chains.
1492 *
1493 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1494 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1495 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1496 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001497 *
1498 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1499 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1500 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1501 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301502 *
1503 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1504 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1505 * the stack.
1506 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001507 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001508 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1509 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001510 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001511 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1512 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1513 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001514 *
1515 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1516 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1517 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1518 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1519 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1520 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001521 *
1522 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1523 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1524 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1525 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1526 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1527 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001528 *
1529 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1530 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1531 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001532 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001533 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1534 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1535 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001536 *
1537 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1538 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1539 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1540 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001541 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001542 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1543 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1544 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001545 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1546 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1547 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001548 *
1549 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1550 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001551 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001552 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1553 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1554 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1555 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001556 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1557 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1558 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1559 * CSA frame.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001560 */
1561enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001562 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001563 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1564 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001565 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1566 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001567 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001568 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001569 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001570 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1571 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1572 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1573 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1574 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1575 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001576 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001577 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1578 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001579 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301580 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001581 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001582 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001583 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001584 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001585 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001586 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001587 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001588 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001589 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001590 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001591};
1592
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001593/**
1594 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001595 *
1596 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1597 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1598 *
1599 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1600 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1601 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001602 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1603 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001604 *
1605 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1606 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001607 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1608 * along with this structure.
1609 *
1610 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1611 *
1612 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1613 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1614 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001615 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1616 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
1617 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001618 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001619 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001620 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001621 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001622 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001623 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001624 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001625 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1626 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1627 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001628 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1629 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1630 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001631 *
1632 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1633 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001634 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1635 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001636 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1637 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001638 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001639 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1640 * can handle.
1641 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1642 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001643 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001644 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001645 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1646 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1647 * aggregation.
1648 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1649 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1650 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001651 *
1652 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1653 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1654 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001655 *
1656 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1657 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001658 *
1659 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1660 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1661 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1662 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001663 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001664 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1665 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1666 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1667 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001668 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1669 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1670 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001671 *
1672 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1673 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1674 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1675 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1676 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1677 * neither enabled.
1678 *
1679 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1680 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1681 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001682 *
1683 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1684 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1685 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001686 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001687struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001688 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001689 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001690 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001691 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001692 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001693 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001694 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001695 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001696 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001697 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001698 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001699 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001700 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001701 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001702 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001703 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001704 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001705 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001706 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001707 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001708 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001709 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001710 u8 uapsd_queues;
1711 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001712 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1713 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001714};
1715
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001716/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001717 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1718 *
1719 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1720 *
1721 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1722 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1723 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1724 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1725 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001726 *
1727 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001728 */
1729struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1730
1731/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001732 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1733 *
1734 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1735 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1736 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001737static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1738{
1739 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1740}
1741
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001742/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001743 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001744 *
1745 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1746 * @addr: the address to set
1747 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001748static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1749{
1750 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1751}
1752
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001753static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1754ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001755 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001756{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001757 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001758 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001759 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001760}
1761
1762static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1763ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001764 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001765{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001766 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001767 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001768 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001769}
1770
1771static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1772ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001773 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001774{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001775 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001776 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001777 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001778}
1779
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001780/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001781 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1782 * @hw: the hardware
1783 * @skb: the skb
1784 *
1785 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1786 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1787 */
1788void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1789
1790/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001791 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001792 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001793 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1794 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1795 *
1796 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1797 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001798 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1799 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1800 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001801 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1802 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1803 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001804 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1805 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1806 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1807 *
1808 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1809 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1810 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1811 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1812 *
1813 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1814 *
1815 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1816 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1817 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1818 * based on the receive flags.
1819 *
1820 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1821 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1822 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1823 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001824 *
1825 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1826 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1827 * handler.
1828 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001829 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001830 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1831 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001832 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001833 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001834 *
1835 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1836 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1837 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001838 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001839
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001840/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001841 * DOC: Powersave support
1842 *
1843 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1844 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001845 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1846 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1847 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1848 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1849 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1850 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1851 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1852 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001853 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001854 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1855 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1856 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001857 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1858 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001859 *
1860 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1861 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1862 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001863 *
1864 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1865 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1866 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1867 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001868 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1869 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001870 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001871 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001872 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1873 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1874 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1875 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1876 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1877 * periods.
1878 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001879 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001880 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1881 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1882 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1883 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1884 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1885 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1886 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1887 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1888 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1889 *
1890 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1891 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
1892 * uapsd paramater in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
1893 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1894 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1895 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1896 *
1897 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1898 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001899 */
1900
1901/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001902 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1903 *
1904 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001905 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001906 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1907 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1908 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1909 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1910 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1911 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001912 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1913 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001914 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1915 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1916 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1917 *
1918 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1919 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1920 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1921 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1922 *
1923 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1924 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1925 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1926 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1927 * - a list of information element IDs
1928 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1929 *
1930 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1931 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1932 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1933 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1934 * vendor information elements.
1935 *
1936 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1937 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1938 *
1939 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1940 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1941 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1942 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1943 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1944 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1945 *
1946 *
1947 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1948 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1949 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1950 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1951 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1952 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1953 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1954 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1955 *
1956 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1957 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1958 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001959 */
1960
1961/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001962 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1963 *
1964 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1965 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1966 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1967 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1968 *
1969 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1970 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1971 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1972 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1973 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1974 * hardware flags.
1975 *
1976 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1977 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1978 * turned off otherwise.
1979 *
1980 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1981 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1982 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1983 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1984 */
1985
1986/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001987 * DOC: Frame filtering
1988 *
1989 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1990 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1991 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1992 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1993 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
1994 *
1995 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
1996 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
1997 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
1998 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02001999 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2000 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2001 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2002 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2003 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2004 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2005 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002006 *
2007 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2008 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2009 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2010 * or dropped.
2011 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002012 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2013 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2014 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2015 * the flag, but not clear it.
2016 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2017 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2018 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2019 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2020 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2021 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2022 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2023 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002024 */
2025
2026/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002027 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2028 *
2029 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2030 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2031 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2032 *
2033 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2034 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2035 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2036 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2037 * the driver code.
2038 *
2039 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2040 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2041 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2042 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2043 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2044 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2045 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2046 *
2047 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2048 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2049 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2050 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2051 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2052 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2053 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2054 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2055 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2056 * @sta_notify callback.
2057 *
2058 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2059 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2060 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2061 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2062 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2063 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2064 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002065 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002066 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2067 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2068 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2069 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2070 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2071 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2072 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002073 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2074 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2075 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002076 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2077 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2078 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2079 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2080 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2081 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2082 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2083 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2084 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2085 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2086 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2087 *
2088 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2089 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2090 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2091 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2092 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2093 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2094 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2095 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2096 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2097 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2098 * to help the @more_data paramter is passed to tell the driver if
2099 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2100 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2101 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2102 *
2103 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2104 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2105 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2106 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2107 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002108 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002109 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2110 *
2111 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2112 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2113 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2114 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002115 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002116 *
2117 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2118 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2119 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2120 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002121 */
2122
2123/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002124 * DOC: HW queue control
2125 *
2126 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2127 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2128 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2129 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2130 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2131 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2132 *
2133 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2134 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2135 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2136 *
2137 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2138 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2139 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2140 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2141 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2142 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2143 * the hardware queue.
2144 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2145 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2146 *
2147 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2148 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2149 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2150 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2151 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2152 *
2153 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2154 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2155 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2156 * off-channel queue: 9
2157 *
2158 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2159 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2160 *
2161 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2162 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2163 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2164 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2165 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2166 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2167 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2168 *
2169 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2170 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2171 *
2172 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2173 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2174 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2175 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2176 */
2177
2178/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002179 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2180 *
2181 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2182 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2183 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2184 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2185 *
2186 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2187 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2188 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2189 *
2190 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2191 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2192 * multicast address.
2193 *
2194 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2195 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2196 *
2197 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2198 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2199 *
2200 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2201 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2202 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2203 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2204 * honour this flag if possible.
2205 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002206 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002207 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002208 *
2209 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002210 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002211 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2212 * those addressed to this station.
2213 *
2214 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002215 */
2216enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2217 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2218 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2219 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2220 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2221 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2222 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2223 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002224 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002225 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002226};
2227
2228/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002229 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2230 *
2231 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2232 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002233 *
2234 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2235 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002236 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002237 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2238 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002239 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2240 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2241 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002242 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002243 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2244 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2245 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2246 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2247 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2248 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2249 * session is gone and removes the station.
2250 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2251 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2252 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2253 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002254 */
2255enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2256 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2257 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002258 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002259 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2260 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2261 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002262 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002263};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002264
2265/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002266 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2267 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002268 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2269 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002270 */
2271enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2272 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002273 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002274};
2275
2276/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002277 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2278 *
2279 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002280 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2281 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2282 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002283 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002284 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2285 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2286 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002287 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2288 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002289 */
2290enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2291 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2292 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002293 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002294 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002295};
2296
2297/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002298 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2299 *
2300 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2301 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2302 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2303 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2304 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2305 *
2306 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2307 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2308 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2309 */
2310enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2311 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2312 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2313};
2314
2315/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002316 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2317 *
2318 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2319 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2320 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2321 *
2322 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2323 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2324 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002325 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002326 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002327 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002328 *
2329 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2330 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2331 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2332 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2333 * or zero.
2334 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2335 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2336 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002337 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002338 *
2339 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2340 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2341 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2342 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002343 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2344 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002345 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002346 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002347 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2348 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2349 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2350 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2351 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002352 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2353 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2354 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2355 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002356 *
2357 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2358 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2359 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2360 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2361 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2362 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002363 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2364 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2365 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2366 * in suspend().
2367 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002368 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002369 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002370 * and @stop must be implemented.
2371 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2372 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2373 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2374 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2375 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002376 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002377 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002378 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2379 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2380 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2381 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2382 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2383 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002384 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2385 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2386 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2387 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2388 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2389 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2390 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002391 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002392 *
2393 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2394 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002395 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002396 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002397 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002398 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2399 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2400 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2401 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2402 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002403 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2404 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002405 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002406 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2407 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2408 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2409 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002410 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2411 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002412 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002413 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002414 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002415 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002416 *
2417 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002418 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2419 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002420 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002421 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002422 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002423 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002424 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2425 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2426 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002427 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002428 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002429 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2430 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2431 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2432 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2433 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2434 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002435 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2436 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2437 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2438 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002439 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002440 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002441 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2442 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002443 * that power save is disabled.
2444 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2445 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2446 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2447 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2448 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2449 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2450 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002451 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002452 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002453 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2454 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2455 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2456 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2457 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2458 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2459 * The callback can sleep.
2460 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002461 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2462 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2463 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2464 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2465 *
2466 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
2467 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002468 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2469 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002470 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002471 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002472 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2473 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2474 * this notification.
2475 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002476 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002477 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2478 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002479 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002480 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002481 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2482 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2483 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002484 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002485 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002486 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2487 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2488 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2489 * The callback can sleep.
2490 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002491 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002492 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002493 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002494 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2495 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2496 *
2497 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002498 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2499 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2500 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2501 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2502 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002503 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302504 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2505 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2506 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2507 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2508 *
2509 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2510 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2511 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002512 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002513 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2514 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2515 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002516 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002517 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2518 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2519 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2520 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002521 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2522 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2523 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2524 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2525 * The callback can sleep.
2526 *
2527 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2528 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2529 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2530 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2531 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002532 * The callback can sleep.
2533 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002534 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2535 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2536 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2537 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2538 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2539 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2540 * Must be atomic.
2541 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002542 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002543 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002544 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002545 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002546 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002547 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002548 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002549 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002550 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002551 *
2552 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002553 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002554 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002555 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002556 *
2557 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2558 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2559 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2560 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002561 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002562 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002563 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2564 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2565 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002566 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002567 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002568 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002569 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2570 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2571 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2572 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002573 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002574 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002575 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2576 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002577 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2578 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2579 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2580 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2581 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2582 * - TX: 1.....7
2583 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2584 * - TX: 8..1...
2585 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2586 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2587 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2588 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2589 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002590 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002591 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002592 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002593 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2594 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002595 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2596 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2597 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002598 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002599 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002600 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2601 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2602 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2603 *
David Spinadel52981cd72013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002604 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2605 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002606 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002607 *
2608 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002609 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2610 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2611 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2612 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
2613 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002614 *
2615 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2616 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2617 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2618 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002619 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002620 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2621 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2622 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2623 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2624 *
2625 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002626 *
2627 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2628 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2629 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2630 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2631 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2632 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002633 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002634 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2635 * must be accepted in this case.
2636 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002637 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2638 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002639 *
2640 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2641 *
2642 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302643 *
2644 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2645 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302646 *
2647 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2648 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2649 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002650 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2651 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002652 *
2653 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2654 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2655 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2656 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
2657 * Note that if the @more_data paramter is %false the driver must check
2658 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2659 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2660 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2661 * more-data bit must always be set.
2662 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2663 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002664 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2665 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2666 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2667 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2668 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2669 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002670 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2671 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2672 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002673 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2674 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002675 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002676 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002677 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002678 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2679 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2680 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002681 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002682 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2683 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2684 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2685 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002686 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002687 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002688 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2689 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2690 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002691 *
2692 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2693 *
2694 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2695 *
2696 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2697 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2698 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002699 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2700 * and can sleep.
2701 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002702 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2703 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2704 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2705 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2706 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2707 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2708 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2709 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2710 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2711 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2712 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2713 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002714 *
2715 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2716 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2717 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2718 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2719 * channel context with different settings
2720 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2721 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2722 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2723 * unbound from vif.
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002724 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2725 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2726 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2727 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2728 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2729 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2730 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002731 *
2732 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2733 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002734 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2735 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2736 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2737 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002738 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2739 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2740 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002741 *
2742 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2743 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2744 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002745 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002746 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2747 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002748 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002749 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002750 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2751 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002752 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002753 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2754 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2755 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2756 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002757 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002758struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002759 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2760 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2761 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002762 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002763 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002764#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2765 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2766 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002767 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002768#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002769 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002771 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2772 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002773 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002774 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002775 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002776 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002777 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2778 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2779 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2780 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002781
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002782 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2783 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2784
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002785 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002786 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002787 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2788 unsigned int changed_flags,
2789 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002790 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002791 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2792 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002793 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002794 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002795 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002796 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002797 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2798 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2799 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2800 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002801 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2803 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002804 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002806 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01002807 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002808 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2809 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002810 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2812 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2813 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
2814 void (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2815 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002816 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2817 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002818 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2819 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002820 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2821 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002822 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002823 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002824 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2825 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2826 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2827 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302828#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2829 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2830 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2831 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2832 struct dentry *dir);
2833 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2835 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2836 struct dentry *dir);
2837#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002838 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002839 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002840 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2842 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2843 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002844 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2846 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002847 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2849 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2850 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002851 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002853 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002854 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2855 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2856 u64 tsf);
2857 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002858 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002859 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002860 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002861 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002862 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2863 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002864 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2865 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002866 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002867 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002868#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd72013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002869 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2870 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002871 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2872 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2873 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002874#endif
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002875 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002876 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2877 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002878 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2879 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002880
2881 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002883 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002884 int duration,
2885 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002886 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002887 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2888 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2889 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302890 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302891 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2892 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002893 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002894 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002895 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002896
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002897 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2898 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2899 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2900 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2901 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002902 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2903 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2904 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2905 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2906 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002907
2908 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2909 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2910 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2911 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2912 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2913 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2915 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002916 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2917 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002918
2919 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2920 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002921
2922 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2923 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2924 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2925 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2926 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2927 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2928 u32 changed);
2929 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2930 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2931 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2932 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2934 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002935
2936 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002937
2938#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2939 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2941 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2942#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002943 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2945 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002946
2947 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2948 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002949};
2950
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002951/**
2952 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2953 *
2954 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2955 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2956 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2957 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2958 * @priv_data_len.
2959 *
2960 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2961 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002962 *
2963 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002964 */
2965struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2966 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2967
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002968/**
2969 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2970 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01002971 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2972 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2973 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002974 *
2975 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002976 *
2977 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002978 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002979int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2980
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01002981/**
2982 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2983 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2984 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2985 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2986 */
2987struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2988 int throughput;
2989 int blink_time;
2990};
2991
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01002992/**
2993 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
2994 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
2995 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
2996 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
2997 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
2998 */
2999enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3000 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3001 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3002 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3003};
3004
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003005#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003006char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3007char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3008char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3009char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3010char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3011 unsigned int flags,
3012 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3013 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003014#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003015/**
3016 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3017 *
3018 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3019 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3020 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3021 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3022 *
3023 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003024 *
3025 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003026 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003027static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3028{
3029#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3030 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3031#else
3032 return NULL;
3033#endif
3034}
3035
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003036/**
3037 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3038 *
3039 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3040 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3041 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3042 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3043 *
3044 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003045 *
3046 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003047 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003048static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3049{
3050#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3051 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3052#else
3053 return NULL;
3054#endif
3055}
3056
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003057/**
3058 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3059 *
3060 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3061 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3062 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3063 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3064 *
3065 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003066 *
3067 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003068 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003069static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3070{
3071#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3072 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3073#else
3074 return NULL;
3075#endif
3076}
3077
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003078/**
3079 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3080 *
3081 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3082 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3083 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3084 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3085 *
3086 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003087 *
3088 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003089 */
3090static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3091{
3092#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3093 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3094#else
3095 return NULL;
3096#endif
3097}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003098
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003099/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003100 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3101 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003102 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003103 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3104 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3105 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003106 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3107 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3108 *
3109 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003110 */
3111static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003112ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003113 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3114 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3115{
3116#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003117 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003118 blink_table_len);
3119#else
3120 return NULL;
3121#endif
3122}
3123
3124/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003125 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3126 *
3127 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3128 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3129 *
3130 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3131 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003132void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3133
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003134/**
3135 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3136 *
3137 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3138 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003139 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003140 *
3141 * @hw: the hardware to free
3142 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003143void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3144
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003145/**
3146 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3147 *
3148 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3149 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3150 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3151 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3152 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3153 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3154 *
3155 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3156 */
3157void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3158
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003159/**
3160 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3161 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3162 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3163 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3164 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3165 * @poll: poll function
3166 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003167 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003168 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003169 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003170void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3171 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3172 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3173 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003174
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003175/**
3176 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3177 *
3178 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003179 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3180 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3181 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3182 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003183 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003184 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003185 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3186 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003187 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3188 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003189 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003190 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003191 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003192 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3193 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003194 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003195void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003196
3197/**
3198 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3199 *
3200 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003201 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3202 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003203 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003204 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3205 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003206 *
3207 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3208 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003209 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003210void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003211
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003212/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003213 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3214 *
3215 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3216 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3217 *
3218 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003219 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3220 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003221 *
3222 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3223 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3224 */
3225static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3226 struct sk_buff *skb)
3227{
3228 local_bh_disable();
3229 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3230 local_bh_enable();
3231}
3232
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003233/**
3234 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3235 *
3236 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3237 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3238 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3239 *
3240 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3241 *
3242 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3243 * each other.
3244 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003245 * @sta: currently connected sta
3246 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003247 *
3248 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003249 */
3250int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3251
3252/**
3253 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3254 * (in process context)
3255 *
3256 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3257 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3258 * applies.
3259 *
3260 * @sta: currently connected sta
3261 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003262 *
3263 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003264 */
3265static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3266 bool start)
3267{
3268 int ret;
3269
3270 local_bh_disable();
3271 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3272 local_bh_enable();
3273
3274 return ret;
3275}
3276
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003277/*
3278 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3279 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3280 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003281#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003282
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003283/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003284 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003285 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003286 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3287 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003288 *
3289 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003290 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3291 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003292 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003293 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3294 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3295 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3296 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3297 *
3298 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3299 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3300 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3301 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3302 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3303 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3304 *
3305 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3306 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3307 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3308 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3309 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003310 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003311void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3312 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003313
3314/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003315 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3316 *
3317 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3318 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3319 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3320 *
3321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3322 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3323 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3324 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3325 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3326 */
3327void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3328 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3329 struct sk_buff *skb,
3330 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3331 int max_rates);
3332
3333/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003334 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3335 *
3336 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3337 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3338 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3339 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003340 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3341 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003342 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003343 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3344 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003345 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003346 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3347 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003348 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003349void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003350 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003351
3352/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003353 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3354 *
3355 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3356 *
3357 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3358 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3359 * for a single hardware.
3360 *
3361 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3362 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3363 */
3364static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3365 struct sk_buff *skb)
3366{
3367 local_bh_disable();
3368 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3369 local_bh_enable();
3370}
3371
3372/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003373 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003374 *
3375 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3376 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3377 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003378 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3379 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003380 *
3381 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3382 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003383 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003384void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003385 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003386
3387/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003388 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3389 *
3390 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3391 * connected STA.
3392 *
3393 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3394 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3395 */
3396void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3397
3398/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003399 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3400 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003402 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3403 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3404 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3405 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3406 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3407 *
3408 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3409 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3410 *
3411 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3412 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3413 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3414 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3415 *
3416 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3417 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3418 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3419 *
3420 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003421 *
3422 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003423 */
3424struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3425 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3426 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3427
3428/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003429 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3430 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003431 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003432 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003433 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003434 *
3435 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003436 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003437static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3438 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3439{
3440 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3441}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003442
3443/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003444 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3445 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3446 *
3447 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003448 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003449 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3450 */
3451void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3452
3453/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003454 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003455 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3456 *
3457 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3458 */
3459bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3460
3461
3462/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003463 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3464 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3465 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3466 *
3467 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3468 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3469 *
3470 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003471 *
3472 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003473 */
3474struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3476
3477/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003478 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3479 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3480 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3481 *
3482 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3483 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3484 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3485 *
3486 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3487 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003488 *
3489 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003490 */
3491struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3493
3494/**
3495 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3496 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3497 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3498 *
3499 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3500 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3501 * BSSID and address is used.
3502 *
3503 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3504 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003505 *
3506 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003507 */
3508struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3510
3511/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003512 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3513 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3514 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3515 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3516 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003517 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003518 *
3519 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3520 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003521 *
3522 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003523 */
3524struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3526 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003527 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003528
3529/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003530 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3531 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003532 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003533 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3534 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003535 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003536 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3537 *
3538 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3539 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3540 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3541 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3542 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003543void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003544 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003545 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003546 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3547
3548/**
3549 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3550 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003551 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003552 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003553 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003554 *
3555 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3556 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3557 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003558 *
3559 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003560 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003561__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3562 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003563 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003564
3565/**
3566 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3567 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003568 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003569 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3570 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003571 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003572 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3573 *
3574 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3575 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3576 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3577 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3578 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003579void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3580 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003581 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003582 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003583 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3584
3585/**
3586 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3587 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003588 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003589 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003590 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003591 *
3592 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3593 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3594 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003595 *
3596 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003597 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003598__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003600 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003601 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003602
3603/**
3604 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3605 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003606 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003607 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003608 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003609 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003610 *
3611 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3612 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003613 *
3614 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003615 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003616__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3617 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003618 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003619 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003620 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003621
3622/**
3623 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3624 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003625 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003626 *
3627 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3628 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3629 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3630 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003631 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3632 *
3633 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3634 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003635 *
3636 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3637 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3638 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3639 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3640 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3641 * use common code for all beacons.
3642 */
3643struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003644ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003645
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003646/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003647 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3648 *
3649 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3650 *
3651 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3652 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3653 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3654 */
3655void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3656 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3657
3658/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003659 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003660 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003661 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3662 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003663 *
3664 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003665 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3666 * with this P1K
3667 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003668 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003669static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3670 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3671{
3672 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3673 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3674 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3675
3676 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3677}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003678
3679/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003680 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3681 *
3682 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3683 * and transmitter address.
3684 *
3685 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3686 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3687 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3688 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3689 */
3690void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3691 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3692
3693/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003694 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3695 *
3696 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3697 * in the packet.
3698 *
3699 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3700 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3701 * encrypted with this key
3702 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3703 */
3704void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3705 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003706
3707/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003708 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3709 *
3710 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3711 * previously installed master key.
3712 *
3713 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3714 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3715 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3716 */
3717void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3718 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3719
3720/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003721 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3722 *
3723 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3724 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3725 * reverse order than in packet)
3726 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3727 * reverse order than in packet)
3728 */
3729struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3730 union {
3731 struct {
3732 u32 iv32;
3733 u16 iv16;
3734 } tkip;
3735 struct {
3736 u8 pn[6];
3737 } ccmp;
3738 struct {
3739 u8 pn[6];
3740 } aes_cmac;
3741 };
3742};
3743
3744/**
3745 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3746 *
3747 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3748 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3749 *
3750 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3751 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3752 * offloaded to the device.
3753 *
3754 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3755 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3756 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3757 */
3758void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3759 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3760
3761/**
3762 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3763 *
3764 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3765 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3766 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3767 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3768 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3769 *
3770 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3771 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3772 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3773 *
3774 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3775 * can be done concurrently.
3776 */
3777void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3778 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3779
3780/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003781 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3782 *
3783 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3784 * @seq: new sequence data
3785 *
3786 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3787 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3788 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3789 * ARP requests.
3790 *
3791 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3792 * can be done concurrently.
3793 */
3794void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3795 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3796
3797/**
3798 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3799 *
3800 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3801 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3802 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3803 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3804 * @seq: new sequence data
3805 *
3806 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3807 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3808 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3809 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3810 *
3811 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3812 * can be done concurrently.
3813 */
3814void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3815 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3816
3817/**
3818 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3819 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3820 *
3821 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3822 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3823 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3824 *
3825 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3826 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3827 */
3828void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3829
3830/**
3831 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3832 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3833 * @keyconf: new key data
3834 *
3835 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3836 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3837 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3838 *
3839 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3840 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3841 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3842 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3843 *
3844 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3845 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3846 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3847 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3848 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3849 * of the reconfiguration.
3850 *
3851 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3852 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3853 *
3854 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3855 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3856 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3857 * the key that's being replaced.
3858 */
3859struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3860ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3862
3863/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003864 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3865 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3866 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3867 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3868 * @gfp: allocation flags
3869 */
3870void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3871 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3872
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003873/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003874 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3875 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3876 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3877 *
3878 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3879 */
3880void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3881
3882/**
3883 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3884 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3885 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3886 *
3887 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3888 */
3889void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3890
3891/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003892 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3893 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3894 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3895 *
3896 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003897 *
3898 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003899 */
3900
3901int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3902
3903/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003904 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3905 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3906 *
3907 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3908 */
3909void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3910
3911/**
3912 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3913 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3914 *
3915 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3916 */
3917void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3918
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003919/**
3920 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3921 *
3922 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3923 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02003924 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3925 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003926 *
3927 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003928 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003929 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003930void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003931
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003932/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003933 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3934 *
3935 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3936 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3937 *
3938 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3939 */
3940void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3941
3942/**
3943 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3944 *
3945 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3946 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3947 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3948 * while associating, for instance.
3949 *
3950 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3951 */
3952void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3953
3954/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003955 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3956 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3957 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3958 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3959 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3960 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3961 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3962 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3963 */
3964enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3965 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3966 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3967};
3968
3969/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003970 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003971 *
3972 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3973 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003974 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3975 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3976 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003977 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003978 *
3979 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003980 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003981 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003982 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3983 */
3984void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003985 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003986 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003988 void *data);
3989
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003990/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003991 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
3992 *
3993 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3994 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
3995 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
3996 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003997 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003998 *
3999 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004000 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004001 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4002 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4003 */
4004void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004005 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004006 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4007 u8 *mac,
4008 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4009 void *data);
4010
4011/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004012 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4013 *
4014 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4015 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4016 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4017 *
4018 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4019 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4020 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4021 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4022 */
4023void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4024 u32 iter_flags,
4025 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4026 u8 *mac,
4027 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4028 void *data);
4029
4030/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004031 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4032 *
4033 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4034 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4035 *
4036 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4037 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4038 */
4039void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4040
4041/**
4042 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4043 *
4044 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4045 * workqueue.
4046 *
4047 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4048 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4049 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4050 */
4051void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4053 unsigned long delay);
4054
4055/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004056 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004057 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004058 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304059 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004060 *
4061 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004062 *
4063 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4064 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4065 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4066 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304067int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4068 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004069
4070/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004071 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004072 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004073 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4074 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4075 *
4076 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004077 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4078 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004079 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004080void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004081 u16 tid);
4082
4083/**
4084 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004085 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004086 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004087 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004088 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004089 *
4090 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4091 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4092 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4093 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004094int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004095
4096/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004097 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004098 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004099 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4100 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4101 *
4102 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004103 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4104 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004105 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004106void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004107 u16 tid);
4108
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004109/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004110 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4111 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004112 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004113 * @addr: station's address
4114 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004115 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4116 *
4117 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004118 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4119 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004120struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004121 const u8 *addr);
4122
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004123/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004124 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004125 *
4126 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004127 * @addr: remote station's address
4128 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004129 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004130 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4131 *
4132 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004133 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4134 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004135 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4136 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4137 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4138 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4139 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4140 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4141 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004142 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004143 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004144 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004145struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4146 const u8 *addr,
4147 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004148
4149/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004150 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4151 * @hw: the hardware
4152 * @pubsta: the station
4153 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4154 *
4155 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4156 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4157 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4158 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4159 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4160 *
4161 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4162 * manner.
4163 *
4164 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4165 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4166 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4167 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4168 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4169 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4170 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4171 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4172 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4173 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4174 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4175 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4176 * woke up while blocked or not.
4177 */
4178void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4179 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4180
4181/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004182 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4183 * @pubsta: the station
4184 *
4185 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4186 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4187 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4188 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4189 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004190 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4191 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4192 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4193 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4194 *
4195 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4196 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4197 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4198 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004199 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004200void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004201
4202/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004203 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4204 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4205 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4206 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4207 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4208 *
4209 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4210 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4211 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4212 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4213 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4214 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004215 *
4216 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4217 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4218 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004219 */
4220void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4221 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4222 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4225 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4226 void *data),
4227 void *iter_data);
4228
4229/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004230 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4231 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4232 * @iter: iterator function
4233 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4234 *
4235 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4236 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4237 * places while calling into the driver.
4238 *
4239 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4240 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4241 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004242 *
4243 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4244 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4245 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4246 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004247 */
4248void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4249 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4251 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4252 void *data),
4253 void *iter_data);
4254
4255/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004256 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4258 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4259 *
4260 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4261 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4262 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4263 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4264 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004265 * %NULL.
4266 *
4267 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004268 */
4269struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4271
4272/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004273 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4274 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004275 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004276 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004277 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004278 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004279 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4280 */
4281void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004282
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004283/**
4284 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4285 *
4286 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4287 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004288 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004289 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4290 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004291 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4292 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004293 *
4294 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4295 * without connection recovery attempts.
4296 */
4297void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4298
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004299/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004300 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4301 *
4302 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4303 *
4304 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4305 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4306 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4307 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4308 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4309 *
4310 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4311 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4312 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4313 * disconnect normally later.
4314 *
4315 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4316 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4317 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4318 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4319 */
4320void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4321
4322/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004323 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4324 * rssi threshold triggered
4325 *
4326 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4327 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4328 * @gfp: context flags
4329 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004330 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004331 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4332 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4333 */
4334void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4335 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4336 gfp_t gfp);
4337
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004338/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004339 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4340 *
4341 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4342 */
4343void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4344
4345/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004346 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4347 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4348 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4349 *
4350 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4351 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4352 */
4353void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4354
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004355/**
4356 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4357 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004358 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004359 *
4360 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4361 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4362 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4363 */
4364void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4365 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4366
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004367/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004368 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4369 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4370 */
4371void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4372
4373/**
4374 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4375 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4376 */
4377void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4378
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004379/**
4380 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4381 *
4382 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4383 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4384 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4385 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4386 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4387 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4388 *
4389 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4390 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4391 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4392 */
4393void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4394 const u8 *addr);
4395
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004396/**
4397 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4398 *
4399 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4400 * buffer.
4401 *
4402 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4403 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4404 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4405 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4406 */
4407void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4408
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004409/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004410
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004411/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004412 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004413 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004414 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4415 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4416 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004417 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4418 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004419 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4420 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4421 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4422 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4423 * RTS threshold
4424 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4425 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004426 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004427 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4428 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004429 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004430 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004431 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004432 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004433struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4434 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4435 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4436 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4437 struct sk_buff *skb;
4438 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4439 bool rts, short_preamble;
4440 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004441 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004442 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004443 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004444};
4445
4446struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004447 const char *name;
4448 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004449 void (*free)(void *priv);
4450
4451 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4452 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004453 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004454 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304455 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004456 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004457 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4458 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004459 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4460 void *priv_sta);
4461
4462 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4463 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4464 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004465 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4466 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004467
4468 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4469 struct dentry *dir);
4470 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4471};
4472
4473static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4474 enum ieee80211_band band,
4475 int index)
4476{
4477 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4478}
4479
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004480/**
4481 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4482 *
4483 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4484 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4485 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4486 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4487 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4488 * not null.
4489 *
4490 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4491 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4492 *
4493 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4494 * that this may be null.
4495 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4496 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4497 */
4498bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4499 void *priv_sta,
4500 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4501
4502
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004503static inline s8
4504rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4505 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4506{
4507 int i;
4508
4509 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4510 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4511 return i;
4512
4513 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004514 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004515
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004516 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004517 return 0;
4518}
4519
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004520static inline
4521bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4522 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4523{
4524 unsigned int i;
4525
4526 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4527 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4528 return true;
4529 return false;
4530}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004531
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004532/**
4533 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4534 *
4535 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4536 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4537 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4538 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4539 *
4540 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4541 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4542 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4543 */
4544int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4545 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4546 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4547
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004548int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4549void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004550
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004551static inline bool
4552conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4553{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004554 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004555}
4556
4557static inline bool
4558conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4559{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004560 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4561 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004562}
4563
4564static inline bool
4565conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4566{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004567 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4568 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004569}
4570
4571static inline bool
4572conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4573{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004574 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004575}
4576
4577static inline bool
4578conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4579{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004580 return conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004581}
4582
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004583static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4584ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4585{
4586 if (p2p) {
4587 switch (type) {
4588 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4589 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4590 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4591 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4592 default:
4593 break;
4594 }
4595 }
4596 return type;
4597}
4598
4599static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4600ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4601{
4602 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4603}
4604
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004605void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4606 int rssi_min_thold,
4607 int rssi_max_thold);
4608
4609void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004610
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004611/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004612 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004613 *
4614 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4615 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004616 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4617 *
4618 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4619 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004620 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004621int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4622
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004623/**
4624 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4625 * @vif: virtual interface
4626 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4627 * @gfp: allocation flags
4628 *
4629 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4630 */
4631void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4632 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4633 gfp_t gfp);
4634
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004635/**
4636 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4637 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4638 * @vif: virtual interface
4639 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4640 * @band: the band to transmit on
4641 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4642 *
4643 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4644 */
4645bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4647 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4648
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01004649/**
4650 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4651 *
4652 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4653 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4654 *
4655 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4656 *
4657 * private:
4658 *
4659 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4660 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4661 */
4662struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4663 u32 next_tsf;
4664 bool has_next_tsf;
4665
4666 u8 absent;
4667
4668 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4669 struct {
4670 u32 start;
4671 u32 duration;
4672 u32 interval;
4673 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4674};
4675
4676/**
4677 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4678 *
4679 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4680 * @data: NoA tracking data
4681 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4682 *
4683 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4684 */
4685int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4686 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4687
4688/**
4689 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4690 *
4691 * @data: NoA tracking data
4692 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4693 */
4694void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4695
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004696#endif /* MAC80211_H */